Home

2010 Dodge Caliber Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

1. 56 J Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The O Supplemental Restraint System SRS pni a Bae kore TETTETETT STTTS 87 D upro ganas AE ET OE REEN 57 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Advanced Front Airbag Features 59 Outside Th Veliide s Suc bor oe art MR 89 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 64 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 021410235 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder Ignition Switch Positions 3 ON 4 START 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn
2. for further information FM 101 1 10 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER 041008827 EVIC If Equipped Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Blectronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea The EVIC consists of the following tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal settings Customer Programmable Features NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Compass heading Outside temperature display Trip computer functions Uconnect Phone displays If equipped Audio mode display Tire Pressure Monitor TPM When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after 1 mile 1 6 km of distance travelled Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available vehicle not in park automatic transmission or vehicle is in motion manual transmission Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle
3. 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal Separating Case Halves 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 021432709 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE
4. 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant
5. Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activat
6. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Vi
7. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Information Provided by DEENLER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues KAR ERROR ETTET 457 O Prepare For The Appointment 457 df te dies PESE 44444 d eed apne ade rr d 457 o Be Reasonable With Requests 457 N If You Need Assistance 457 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 458 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 458 Hn Medco Contactes ss x Ee AD RAS BO 458 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 459 A eve CONTACT avo messie we se se ee Re 459 Mi Warranty Information 460 E MOPAR Parts ose xd ee ERR 460 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 460 O In The 50 United States And Washington BENE OM oer ee eee ee ee ee O In Canada 456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id W Publication Order Forms 461 E DOChOB Grades 24i bs He DER RR x RAE 463 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire H Temperaire Grades 44 4 ed oa oh ee ee AE 463 Quality Grades sys EES AR ed bee RE WE dies 462
8. Rear Window Defroster CAUTION The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster the heating elements and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica e Use care when washing the inside of the rear tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an addi and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to tional five minutes of operation press the button a the heating elements Labels can be peeled off second time after soaking with warm water NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra window defroster only when the engine is operating sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features 189 lal Instrument Cluster Base 190 B Instrument Cluster Premium 191 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 192 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ige oe OE vet EE E VS 206 O Oil Change Required If Equipp
9. Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag Inflator Unit The driver side knee airbag unit is located in the instru ment panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is gener ated to inflate the knee airbag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the airbag to inflate to the full size The airbag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The knee airbag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of airbag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME
10. Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact de
11. 298 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift CAUTION down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis sion CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if itis slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything Shift Lever NOTE You MUSI press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
12. 400 Air Conditioner Maintenance 402 it CONCINOMING uade ipee ode e iRS 444 44 276 Air Conditioning Controls vacetarstiegeoices 276 Air Conditioning Filter sses ace m ke Mas 4944 286 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 287 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 402 403 Air Conditioning System 276 280 402 Air Pressure Tires 00000000 eee 331 ur A P 57 68 Airbag Deployment seses euis o x rt have hese ds 69 ANDIE Leht ssa ed e dore PER ES 66 71 87 194 Arba Mainienaitee pers RS E 46 ee EED EE PES 70 ADAL ide 24644 Rene KEER PR EER RE 60 64 67 68 Airbag Window Side Curtain 61 64 68 Alam OE ii P 201 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 259 269 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 408 433 434 CP MAA SEL EE rE 433 Died sisie etis RI bes Ades ses A11 Anti Lock Brake System ABS iv 408 id Weeg 311 Anti Lock Warning Light 2040442444800 46 mn 204 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm y Appearance Care x sx 5453 9 esI ma DOER kepis 417 Posistance TOWING e aa te samicka dui AE os H9 Automatic Dimming Mirror iw six 625 6 ns 95 Automatic Door Locks ess 29 30 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 280 Automatic Transaxle 12 293 298 373 416 Fluid Level Check xesksdrer ctbyETOO RS 416 Int
13. Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the syste
14. Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU
15. If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARS cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough s
16. LODGE 2010 Caliber OWNER S MANUAL dy m O c REDE INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 n ER WK RE eae ea EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS Information Provided by DEENLER CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will b
17. Vehicle Identification Number 010806190 A INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Information Provided by DEENLER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 O Ignition Key Removal 12 B Locking Doors With A Key 14 H Key In Ignition Reminder 14 W Sentry GEE EE ET OR N 14 El Replacement Keys 2235 2c T Rex ds 15 O Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information su ss c9 bre meg e 17 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 17 H To Set The Security Alarm o To Disarm The System D Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override lll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate D Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press D Illuminated Approach If Equipped o To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id O Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 21 3 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 22 O Using The Panic Alarm o2 woe Rma 22 O Programming Additional Transmitters 23 E General Information 29a sedes bee RED 3 23 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equip
18. graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire
19. Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds e as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or
20. Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be
21. The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the HomeLink Buttons Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu mation or assistance rity Alarm is active Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 81cb44fe 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeL
22. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be guickly re moved by tuming the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas
23. all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Driver s Door 1st or All Doors appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
24. exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability A STARTING AND OPERATING 337 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Never use a tire with a smaller load index or that specified for your vehicle Some combinations capacity other than what was originally equipped of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load pension dimensions and performance characteris index could result in tire overloading and failure tics resulting in changes to steering handling and You could lose c
25. may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually unplug the device and plug it in again NOTE To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter 115 Volt Power Outlet N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 WARNING CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders behind the center console for Your vehicle is equi
26. operation or more than 5046 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer L C O LL L LL Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or lea
27. pedal 80f7bc4b Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transmission lubricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transmission Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Units in mph km h xim 1102 2108 s104 ens el eration 1 to 2 2to3 3to4 4to5 Rate AN En 14 23 23 37 29 47 45 72 gines 12 19 18 29 25 40 32 52 Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch
28. star e O C G continue delete dial download edit home p 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primar Primar language return to main menu select phone send N set up phone settings or phone list names list phones mobile mute off towing assistance new entr transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again OO n pager pair a phone voice training ohone pairing pairing work ohonebook ohone book YES previous record again o redial N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the eguipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
29. they BU in the front neat eae be struck by a deploy should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child HIS Dae oer airbag which may cause severe or and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap fatal injury to the infant shoulder belt actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s
30. when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum
31. with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions
32. you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or Lap Shoulder Belts outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in e these areas are more likely to be seriously injured All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped a or killed with combination lap shoulder belts DE Do not allow people to ride in any area of your The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the belts shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you
33. 1962 e When installing the IPM cover it is important to Red Conn PCM ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get Pink into the IPM and possibly result in an electrical Headlamp Washer use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Control Smart Glass The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated If Equipped may result in a dangerous electrical system over 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it Natural If Equipped indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 30 Amp Pink mu 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed system failure Green When replacing a blown fuse it is important to mu N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Lampe ss scarce a dae foe Bae ae dd T578 Center Dome Lamp ress sasssa 2s rara He T578 Rear Cargo Flashlight u deep b eats 8 A3SLF LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam High Beam Headlamp H13 Front Par
34. 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T tiek 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are high pressure compact Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only 322 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in NS TA TING AND OPERATING 323 EXAMPLE Service Description Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum
35. 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305232 Media Center 130 RES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release t
36. Filter 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L EE SUM 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Battery Under Cover 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before a
37. Flex Fuel Vehicles 350 GLEOITE os teae tenses pay aa EE y at 336 El MINI In Gasoline ss uc sie cede Ke 9 N 350 EL Replacement Tires a 6 os 69850 KA mns 336 O Materials Added To Fuel ius 351 Bolero 4242 8 nm 338 O Fuel System C QUOS s gt AAR ER x ER ded 9 NM uo Tires eee thes dees EE P d 338 D Carbon Monoxide Warnings 952 Mi Tire Rotation Recommendations poo N adding Fidel 2224949 9 READ BR AIRES 353 292 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id H Fuel Piller Cap Gas Cap uie seer a 353 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 399 W Vehicle Loading ES ss ee 355 oO Vehicle Certification Label 355 la Trailer Towing 000 357 O Common Towing Definitions 357 O Installing A Trailer Hitch usano 360 O Trailer Hitch Classification s i sare REEL 360 H Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer WeIBDEBAUHPS u d tucps RAL oo ek OER EES 361 H Trailer And Tongue Weight 362 H Towing Requirements 43i 92 we es 363 Hi low DS soda e ates bet ES Carb kei 368 N Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 369 o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Give ecs RES ra Pane wa REEL deris ard 369 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 293 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNINCG Never leave
38. Fluid sos iese 844 HERE oe REE rs 89 Mile el TIPOS soas E oe ee oa eo ee OR EE ee S 336 Liewe Edan oa an ebb se eee nee N 35 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 183 Light DUDS 4 239 wed 93d tud oe hee GEND 89 427 Di 63 bomen LC AR N PER ER RR 89 146 DEE aca N y tutes SR ER ER ED RO 66 71 87 194 PAGO Ra teks Soe oe Ee ke EE 201 EP d dae PA ENE EE OR SEE 204 Duel oon Ene KEER OE HOG KS SESS 429 474 INDEX NEE Id Brake WOES sos be 94x RTI HIP TE ESRE ED 195 Bulb Replacement ia soes REK RR 403 HR EES 427 ac DP 178 Center Mounted Stop ses ds Een wem hor ia 432 Dimmer Switch Headlight 146 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 318 Engine lemperature Warning x4 ecards 194 qur PP CC 46 4 94450554654 89 FOS VD EER on 147 201 428 Headlight DWitE cs dict re a DE e toria a Sas 146 els Ge lite AR pce e ao fo he sq ET PR eS 146 High Beam Indicatot s 5 134 aen44444 HEAD ER 205 ME SA ei SARIE es ao pima eee a 146 Bra MP T 431 Lights On Remubdlet yes sacer dd ER ay ss 147 korladl eperdi SE ER ERA RE GE RE es 193 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 203 Map SEQQ fiat ee RE eos ee oe ee T 150 Oil Presse seep bree eee eas DE ED DES 194 Deal belt RCMUIMGGE ist xe 5 29 pirrar eas 194 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 201 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 203 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 201 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS
39. Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for equipped with four wheel disc brakes damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary _1 Flush and replace the engine coolant Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary L Flush and replace the engine coolant if Replace the air conditioning filter not done at 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
40. Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN 356 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size liste
41. Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location gt
42. O Tread weal si ses AO G eX ESE rarse 463 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you g
43. PARK position e You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position 302 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering column or shift lever could result You must also press the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission CVT and or the engine from overspeed Changes down will only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stall
44. Pd esel rm 133 els RE OE EE OE ERIS RR 137 Lumbar SUPPORE od 3 s kakaa ea 134 Rear FOIE TE 142 Rear Folding Sedan sug pe EE EE eR dace 142 bedlback Release 3x x RA RRERSAYREREYS 135 il P PU 135 Security Alarm Theft Alarm sso euo pe 25 17 Selection of Oil 44444406045 ESSO AES Hea ee eS 398 Sentry Key Immobilizer 224 2 pure 5 ews Be uS 14 Sentry Key Programming si 4 05506 od een se os 16 Sentry Key Replacement oues ours ex d cb aw sa Hy lig Service Assistance ss ss SE ES SS SS Se 457 Service Contract cos ascsacc a acm maio red 459 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lesen 203 Service Manuals leen 461 Sene diet led spe 4 93 ops ex 218 233 235 238 247 winner serga 484 RU OR HD RE foe 211 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 297 Shoulder Belts 42 succ wem eod EA E s 39 DIC A irr P C 67 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 286 biol TUI serred ia es Rs Gees oe 89 200 429 Slippery burtaces Driving ON xe 2399 9 9t es 304 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 338 N INDEX 479 ONOW Tiles MA IR SO ETE OF 225 338 Pare diie C 333 374 Specifications Oil EE uu EE OT OE RES 398 Speed Control Cruise Control 155 199 vorrei rr 193 Speedometer and Odometer 190 DIOGO ere Oe ee ee bore oe eee ae ee 295 Automatic Transmission ls 295 Engine Fails XO Star
45. RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possib
46. STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be 308 STARTING AN
47. This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Fold Down Speakers REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the center portion of the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 MH NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operationa Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first detent to activate the rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id
48. Units In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ENGLISH or METRIC appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by com pleting one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings 10 5 6 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map To Set the Variance with
49. Warranty Information a sus Sura Es RE NE moed A60 Washer Adding Filid 34 has Oes oie R RE SR 404 Washers Windshield lees 152 Washing Vehicle x35 doe RES dece aoro Roses 418 Water Diving TOER iacet dA Een CASE ar 305 Wheel and Wheel Trim eee 420 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 420 Wind DEDE Goss ees s AAS Pane Sac d dob id 167 Widow POC e pabese cox db a ee epee nes 286 WINdOWS ux Ge AE TE OR RE ES EE EK 33 Reis ORE SEE N OE OE EE OE HE 33 Windshield Defroster 87 278 283 Windshield Washers 151 152 Windshield Wipers eu aopd we uus KERE yt 151 404 Wipers IDIermilleDU 2444424 cee HERE ES HR nes 152 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10PM491 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
50. a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level
51. a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Qu Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may oc
52. a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will al
53. above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 If you insert
54. and Passenger Air bags 2 Driver Knee Airbag NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB If the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags they are marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any collision the
55. and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System Automatic transmission vehicles are equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed 300 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transmission will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a removable plug in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake
56. based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could has been in a tightly closed container Keep the be damaged causing partial or complete brake master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times failure This could result in an accident Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point CAUTION This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall failure This could result in a accident clutch system performance Improper brake fluids Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also sion damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transmission CVT If Eduipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid which has been formulated with special metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper steel belt traction on the drive and driv
57. by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the shift lever in the PARK position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is number of reasons A child or others could be running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition key in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move key from the ignition and apply the parking the vehicle brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever Continued all the way forward until it stops The following indicators should be used to ensure that ag you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e ook at the shift indicator window on the shifter bezel to ensure it is in the
58. children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL NOTE e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor e If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position 294 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles
59. commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the NS TA TING AND OPERATING 315 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very guickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions Continued WARNING Continued e The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving
60. control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 030907663 Power Seat Switch N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Heated Seats If Eduipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select High level heat 4y ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off If High level heating is selected the system automatically switches to Low level heating and turns one indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation If Low level heating is selected the system automatically turns
61. discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to
62. during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ea
63. each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming Homel ink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has suc cessfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also b
64. entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the 6 VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your ce
65. equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emer gencies for further information Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine NS TA TING AND OPERATING 2
66. exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature
67. for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by DEENLER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Eise PPP 95 O Inside Day Night Mirror osse ses ee 95 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 95 H Outside Mirror Driver Side 96 o Outside Mirror Passenger Side 96 O Power Mirrors If Equipped 97 o Heated Mirrors If Equipped 98 O Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 98 ETS Visor Sliding Peale oeoevaxevume ss 98 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 99 sign se rere PP 101 none Call Features pss aextee nae 4 presi 109 O Uconnect Phone Features uum ods Re 112 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 116 H Things You Should Know Abou
68. from a maximum of approxi mately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Mist Feature CAUTION Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the allow the wipers to return to the park position before wipers will continue to operate turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehi
69. gad See ep ue S endi a Ra OE DE 360 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter Hood Release leen 144 SNOW PP m 12 ke TPPT 12 Ignition Key Removal sexe te PERI ES 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key x25 RYE EA 14 Infant Restraint i22 ceno 64 8 bao BEREA da ea es 75 N INDEX 473 Information Center Vehicle 206 Inside Rearview Minor 224444 44 im ders ske Instrument Cluster lt lt 44 44 d0 EES RES xs 190 192 Instrument Panel and Controls 189 Instrument Panel Cover i e RE Ma be ie Gdn 422 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 422 Integrated Power Module Fuses 423 Interior Appearance Care ses adm err RR 420 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 152 INMOCUCHON waa Sore e AR shee eas ean ewe aes E Jack LOCIHOM v veas s OR EA EEG Scb HRS 374 Jack Operation sus uoce e Pe oir tna 374 376 Jacking Instructions 6 5 42445 RE RU ex 376 Jomp Dat OE SO RE 360 Key droe IE ours 3 rx iek EER EER PR 16 Key Replacement suere 545 9x ded S S TRE ERAS 15 Key Sentry CIBIODIIZGE 22454 2 BREER RE deo ed 14 ker ARONA 2 sane e EE 41v ES IHRER A 14 Keyless Entry System Sedan 18 4 CETT 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals ees 429 Lap zonould r Delis 3 a is curso vu DA ee Y eas 39 BP eis ARE EEN EE EE ON ET ares d 89 LIGOU 24464245 46nn58 4544 beeen HA RO 144 Lead Free Gasoline 0 000 eee 348 Leaks
70. ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If th
71. install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap e Route the tether strap t
72. is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring S
73. is in motion Gate Ajar with a single chime Headlamps or Park Lamps On Key In Ignition Check TPM System 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Oil Change Reguired Oil Change Required If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 5 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Functions 041008828 EVIC Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions are dis
74. is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun Power Sunroof Switch roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light 034206938 166 UNDERSTANDING THE F
75. kinked or obstructed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 WARNING e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id
76. lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file
77. mode say Memo In l l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command EVR System Setup E button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you the following commands may say the following commands Save to save the memo e Language German Continue to continue recording e Language Dutch Delete to delete the recording e Language Italian e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Language English During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Language Spanish e Language French Repeat to repeat a memo e Tutorial Next to play the next memo e Voice Training 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command SVR button say System Setup and once you
78. more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and d In very cold weather a if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 Information Provided by DEENLER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures ss es ss 293 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 293 H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 299 E NODUDLODIBINE 2 2 99 995 9 PAR ACER PRIOR EROS 293 O Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or x 19 aie eu seed mm 294 O If Engine Fails To Start ese ses 294 AARG Marie vs tyes HER senna eee es 205 N Engine Block Heater If Equipped 295 lll Manual Transmission If Equipped O Five Speed Manual Transmission O Recommended Shift Speeds EDO nsmf HDB 2 232 os EDE RE E REOR RR d ll Automatic Transmission If Equipped O Brake Transmission Interlock System O Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock DUSIBHLA 4 52 3 4 484 Oe oe dv hake es oes RE sie Kanes PETRI ET 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id N AutoStick If Equipped 302 sieut A Tr TT 302 O General Information ss us lt 4 ers ee x 303 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 304 DACE ON uoces nas e SSS aU Pace A Kes E 304 EM crede TEC 304 B Driving Through Water 305 E Flowing Rising Water 23 os a RE elses 305 O Shallow Stand
79. objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Reception Ouality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing
80. on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030407085 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mitrot UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Power Mirrors If Eduipped finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the The control for the power mirrors is located on the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror driv
81. on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torgue to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transmission Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time th
82. only Inside the Chill Zone is a vent which when opened allows either air conditioned or fresh air to flow into the 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Chill Zone compartment Depending on ambient tem CONSOLE FEATURES perature and A C setting the compartment can keep The floor console contains both an upper and lower beverages cool storage compartment 037108836 035308831 Positioning Slide Control Upper Storage Compartment Vehicles without air conditioning can use that space for storage The lower bin holds the Owner s Manual and other important documents N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 To open the upper storage compartment push inward on To open the lower storage compartment lift upward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart open ment and lift the lid open i 035308832 l Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Compartment 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music Press in on the flashlight to release it players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging
83. parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Rotate tires Replace the spark plugs Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace the accessory drive belt s O C C O O O G LL L LL M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451
84. press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is pro
85. purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best
86. raised voice level ase c Hi Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater a
87. range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera back into the normal range If the pointer remains on ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to engine off immediately and call an authorized deal exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range ership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 2 Fuel Door Reminder This indicates that the fuel filler door is located lt W on the left side of the vehicle 3 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 4 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph kph 5
88. recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in o
89. search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turni
90. stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where
91. the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped Parking Brake with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in on the transmission locking mechanism may make it the instrument cluster will illuminate difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING CAUTION e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or BRAKE SYSTEM move the vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged standard equipment In
92. the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME But
93. the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate o
94. the bulbs N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 5 Remove the bulb from the socket and replace License Lamps 1 Using a trim stick or equivalent gently pry on the side i 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise and re move from the lamp Center High Mounted Stoplamp The lamp is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer 3 Pull the bulb from the socket for replacement N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 5 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 0L and 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 26 Liters Cooling System oo T y 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Par
95. the event power assist is lost for before driving failure to do so can lead to brake any reason for example repeated brake applications failure and an accident with the engine off the brakes will still function How Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or greater than that required with the power system oper injury Also be certain to leave an automatic ating transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the bra
96. the ignition in the ON position with a short button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until you have 040506040 displayed the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Variance message and the current vari ance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two seconds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least one second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the Variance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default Zone is 8 During program ming the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Using a quick button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button se
97. the same time You may install three child restraints at the same time using the LATCH system in the outboard seating positions and the vehicle seat belt in the center position Always use the top tether both with the vehicle seat belt or the lower anchors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 First loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hook or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint routing it over the head restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove the slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint Th
98. to switch to the main menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel 1 ie OE ELE ea d ae dH e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu s 44 p e h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi ae Mc ne el tO eee OE To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder
99. transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 will chirp twice if programmed Then the NOTE To Enter Remote Start on the RK
100. vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Airbag Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an p impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a c
101. when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light qum This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 10 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi al Tm tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and ca
102. x RS on 54 665 o soo 454s 99 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 99 Placard Tire and Loading Information 326 Power Door LOCKS 20243 ARE ceed 9 at 28 MIO peregi enarek DO Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 168 visu PPP m 307 OUM OO ius Jaa EER AS NE DS ES UTE ER EE 165 lunc PET EE 33 Power oteernne PUG vas ceca Gowen ooo CIES 435 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 56 Prepatation Tor Jacking yaa x cies eos m HR vows 9 0 Pretensioners om A L 50 Programmable Electronic Features 211 laca TT TGCS cw se ER Ee RE OER ERAS RES 393 Radio Operon Lu uec ee HEER PR RR SR 5 275 N INDEX 477 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 268 leas Pop LIONS perik 2 300 453A PR SOEUR E 429 Kear Ligate Cedam asse EERS SURE OE Ed 35 Rear Seat POL use Res E ops me Suc s 142 Rear Window Defroster iua ses Rr ex dew Ve 184 Rear Window Features 2a eese rr ew 183 Rear Wiper Washer 24762422854 REEDS e Oe 183 Recreational TOWING iis bes Ri ER APA ED RE 369 Reed siele pe EER EK x9 dp ves 403 Reminder Seat Belt leen 55 Remote Control Door LOCKS a a 18 DCN ie Ka asse do me enG EE a 17 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 18 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 276 Remote Starting Systeni usos RE e d doe ER des 25 Replacement Bulbs ii ewe etx InERIHER CSS 427 Replacement Neve oss EXAM SI E
103. years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position lef Center Right FirstRow o Second Row ALR AUR AUR Third Row If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing
104. you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whet
105. 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter I
106. 151 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 O Intermittent Wiper System 152 E Windshield Washers 4 sed 9x x BEd cs 192 A Mist POSU ss cedi uos kou d qo BARE Rod 153 la Tilt Steering Column 154 N Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 155 HI do ENG ers kaiaa e seen a e RES Se 155 B To Set a Desired Speed 156 Vo prter i Dn 156 O To Resume Speed 22 xb d eee eee ee buns 156 o To Vary The Speed Setting 156 mpi d M bcne cod prr MEME 157 o To Accelerate For Passing 158 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 158 O Programming HomeLink 2 22 es 160 H Gate Operator Canadian Programming 162 Using Hoimel KP aces ex urs pere 163 O Reprogramming A Single Ltomebmk DUON sss dera grep nsei Eee 163 E Gec M CT O Troubleshooting Tips llle 164 O General Information 4 cue awe 9 Set onc DE 164 N Power Sunroof If Equipped 165 O Opening The Sunroof EE 166 Ei Closine The Sunroof 5 3 sad 1279 45 9 239089 166 O Pinch Protect Feature is spe grt 166 O Pinch Protect Override sen 167 O Venting Sunroof Express ius ach dares 167 O Sunshade Operation us my es eet Ihe E 167 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id o Wind Buffeting O Sunroof Maintenance ss 24 erm sa a 167 O Ignition Off Operation 0 168 Bl Electrical Power Outlets 168 W Pow
107. 201 Traction Control son x died ue hog Eon cies 318 PURO ind 23 ex epo EE E ped 89 146 148 429 YE 0064448544 OR EE OS 193 Warning Instrument Cluster Description p Loading Vellcl8 oos as races HER 4 eee EDE 399 397 S wu ione eea 6 Sn DR as 997 NGS 4246444544425 EXE BIN RR RE ROS dedos a 326 Locks Clad Proi elioit sans gut AIR PER RR RES gs ol poo 2 Lower DOO TC ees oo eee es 28 Lubrication DOR 4403 EERDER KOR atone gees 403 Lumbar SUD DOM perseri ooh eo oe eGo oe 134 N INDEX 475 Maintenance bree Dattery i223 3g eee eh 401 Maintenance General 0000008 396 Maintenance Procedures een 396 Maintenance Schedule 438 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 203 394 Manual Service eee 461 Manual Transaxle sin ride xs 293 296 417 DowbsbilUlg sererai be than oneness wed 207 Fluid Level Check 44 2 2 93 owes 417 Frequency of Fluid Change 55229 9o 417 Lubricant Selection 2 9 suce e REY RR 417 Map Reading Lights i s sa SERE SERE Ren 150 Master Cylinder Brakes ss ss Se eas 413 kie de 4 5 ba e un 54a SLAAIE OR DEE EER 95 Automon DUTINE sya a Gear oe an eae e d 95 Electric Powered 122a sad aea 97 Hee 2 oe ee ee See ee ee ee a eS 98 SNC on ot ER AE EES ee 8 96 Rea ie oce oek Go eG he Oe RE ee EARS 95 MODI no oe SOE Be SR ee eee eau ee eae OE aes 98 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Ine Pressur
108. 36 286 Euge Od 244 beet erg RE BE RACE 400 434 Flashers eee 372 Hazard Warning 4 sacos a0 v doe ERE RE OR DRS 372 TU oal oos 2444 HERE MEER PR 89 200 429 Plat Tue SUDO os shea PE ER EO AS HA Pe 380 Flooded Engine Starting ua 2 ede x Ren 294 N INDEX 471 Fluid Brake 45 6 44 e84 404 eet4 055 435 Plaid Capacities sees LAE dre pos dG BO HER eas 433 Fid Cake 2 za sura OT ON ee EE FEES 89 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle Ls 416 Power Dleete oc ce ne iS ARE RE en ays va 307 el ie EER AS was eee ee ye OT ET FOR OP 434 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 434 oek ol ses oe uere d were s 147 201 428 Folding Rear Seal saccos St ard et neeenes ia eee 142 Folding Rear Seat Seca i su ts aw conn EYE aeg 142 Freeing A Stuck Velie 25 44 4548244820845 385 Front POSIBOR LIE IE sus ch vow mi pure ue dress 427 Dueh 2 291928 93 22 25 29 92 ERE ORE V 348 434 Don AC PROE WE BOERE RR DR 353 Pe AAR N TE EE ETER OE Jal Capaci eM CTI 433 Clean Ait Aves ues bu oo EERS EER HO ee EE 349 Filler ap Gas CAD saans BEER ta ER SE 193 353 Piller Door Gas Cap 4295 RE mor eR HERES 193 CASON 644 Go EER y Bur BE BA Rode d I aed 348 tru P 199 ERAS AT N EE DEE OT 193 Octane Katine sisie dd 19v AREA d ebat 348 keotiremeids ao aono edm xo d eR BERDE ess 348 TOU apa 3 326 3xc aces E Ea EE ES Di 433 Fuel System Cahon unes sio RH eue 354 PU HDO D TIT 353 lu c PETIT 423 Garage Door O
109. 77 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 045607540 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets J 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is
110. 95 for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess After Starting fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and warms up repeat the Normal Starting procedure ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start grounded three wire extension cord the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving CAUTION Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 296 STARTING AND OPERATING MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Five Speed Manual Transmission WARNINCG You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator
111. Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Release the clutch pedal 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer conditio
112. CH Compatible child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system e tons visible In addition there are tether strap an chorages behind each rear seating position located in the rear surface of the seat back The lower anchorages are round bars part of the seat and body structure and are readily These are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the surfaces The lower strap hooks are passed over the top of each bar pushing aside the seat cover material with each having a hook or connector for Thi attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side Do not install child restraints using the LATCH system in all three rear seating positions at
113. Caro Ated Features qa 3 4552 PER DR ERES 178 Cargo Compartment Er SS EN TAT ew eee eS 178 468 INDEX NEE Id Eer EE siene OER eee ERA ES PR OS 178 Carro Load PIOOE 2 42 92293929 4 99 44 bo Sep 151 Cale He DON HS sie ars 9 23 5 E EE RUP ASA 181 Cellular Phone een 99 275 Center High Mounted Stop Light 432 Chans TNC AA ek OR oo ee eee HO 338 Chansmnne A Flat Ie a sse a e OES VRA HS AE 374 CDI Tie IE si vis Ge Behan eee Red 322 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 203 394 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 85 CHECKS ale A D 85 CIVIC Rest osse ie 5005 ne po eee BL aia 74 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 78 Child Satety LOCKS o ice oco Pa Eb Re RR 23 400552 31 Bied AN ET EE EE OT N ESE 80 Clean Air Gasoline is oi hase Gee BEKER cyi 349 Cleaning WHC m 420 Climate Control iss SE ORE EUR SY xq der Ras 275 al asertar EEREN 218 233 235 238 247 Gud a Pr 413 Clutch Fluid sdb Eo RR Rb Res 413 Coin Holder usare c ade chau REC ed eres 176 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 274 Compac pate lie 24 send xac eee ane EE mi 333 Connector UCT os eee oe ee eee es oe ee EE OO eee 202 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 262 CONSOIG ARE AE EE HS S PRIM SEM PERSE 176 Contract Service 2444045 664 ERROR EX ES 459 Coolant Antifreeze leen 433 434 Cooler BEVERIEE si ES ee dE RP EAS E 175 COOMMe EE on aai eb D
114. D OPERATING NN Id checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely STARTING AND OPERATING 309 NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear
115. Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system automatic transmission only There is a removable plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The ignition key must be in the ON position to use the override lever Information Provided by DEENLER MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 2 0L 391 N Engine Compartment 2 4L 392 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 393 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 393 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance LIOBPOS tad qe uwae a wars HER eR ee E dre Pu 394 B Replacement Parts ES ES Se 395 W Dealer Service EE es se 995 Bl Maintenance Procedures 396 aie ai OU Lou daas AE EE OE NE OE CR 397 EENS ING OUNCE s aed GENEEM 1 4 JUR RR dd 400 O Engme Air Cleaner Filter i ms a xac ems 400 O Mamtenance Free Battery ise BR
116. E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter NH 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter _J Replace the spark plugs L1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Mile
117. E transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Securit
118. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening the Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Express Mode Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically this is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing the Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically this is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remov
119. EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered N WHAT TO DO IN E
120. Flashlight The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience Press And Release UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high To install the Cargo Cover insert either end of the cover twice for low and a third time to return to off into one of the two notches located in the rear trim panels With one of the cover ends installed push inward on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel V RU EU 035410217 Oo Three Press Switch Cargo Cover i The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo Rear Trim Notches dates the reclining rear seat 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Using the handle pull the cover toward you and guide WARNING the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides of the rear trim panel In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment R
121. For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period ru Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is sup
122. ICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This turn on the high beam headlights until the multifunction lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 30 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headligh
123. ING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check
124. ING YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position W 022608931 _ Ai id Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average You will prefer a higher position When you release the anchor age try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions With A Mini Latch And Buckle A three point seatbelt with a mini latch and buckle allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini latch and reg
125. Ing Operation NOTE AutoStick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 303 AutoStick operation is activated in the DRIVE position by moving the shift lever side to side Moving the shift lever to the side will activate AutoStick and shift up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case sixth gear ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to will activate AutoStick and shift to the next lower manual ratio After AutoStick is activated the manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio AutoStick is deactivated e By holding the shift lever to momentarily e When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE e When in sixth position touching the shift lever to the right e When heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS applica tion is detected General Information e f a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio e If alow range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transmission will automatically select the next higher ratio e If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine Howeve
126. MENT PANEL 201 NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 23 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 24 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided I should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should deter mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to
127. MERGENCIES 379 CAUTION WARNING Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp spare tire is mounted incorrectly edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel prop erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service Mounting Spare Tire station Lol 060633619 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until itis 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and the tire pressure as reguired stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery boos
128. OW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click gt E e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will 7 not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued 022608929 Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that reduces the risk of sleg under the belt in a collision your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit y
129. R VEHICLE 87 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Ways 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARN
130. RA PARS seams 407 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 409 Coolant Level leen 408 411 Disposal of Used Coolant 411 Drain Flush and Refill 408 N INDEX 469 INSPCCUON oe atagutaete cs one DRR AS ee as 411 Points to Remember 410 412 Fiesstite d d fines oop R9 ee ee ODE 410 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 408 Corrosion Protection si em Gia cate ae as 417 CIUISS LISDE usu sour ect a op d 930p pEr EENES 199 CUPON I 244445 HER ROUEN PURIS UR ees 176 Customer Assistance eee 457 Dealer Service eee 395 Defroster Rear Window 184 Defroster Windshield 87 278 283 Delay Intermittent Wipers 152 Diagnostic System Onboard Dimmer Switch Headlight iis eene sea oe RR es 148 Dipsticks Power Sle ting 2325064 39S Idee Y REG ee oes 307 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 411 Eric OU is a RR Ea P E Se ee tes SES 399 Door LOCKS iss EER PRES EE AA KRAAIE ESE R 27 Door Locks Automatic sisie sedes REC REO 29 Door Opener Garage oes HERE o he dom qd 158 Downsin sasssa aca duree aruis dot a ie 297 Driver s eat Back DIU secere cree ME PR eas 135 Driving On Slippery SUITACES s csc ee ka RR PER PER 304 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow onding Walet uua dos ud ates eet qoe eos 305 Electric Remote Mirrors css eere RR es Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Contro
131. RE 401 O Air Conditioner Maintenance O Body DUDECOBOIE 25 abriuri tAYOEERSS o Windshield Wiper Blades 404 o Adding Washer Fluid liess 404 HExhaustoystell 12 493 2 442 Ee eens 25 405 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M D Cooling System Eb ele 44 45 beg ce aa crum 413 D Automatic Transmission CVT I Eotipped 25 44 4046 MERE RES Eur d oes 416 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 417 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMCSION 2 2 9 MS EO yop v os va dep d 417 W Fuses Tm 423 O Integrated Power Module IPM 423 W Vehicle Storage sous o vier xd o as 427 W Replacement Bulbs 427 407 W Bulb Replacement sees 427 O Front Headlamps Parking And Turn Signal lios TIT 427 Hd 07 LEDE s ord ERAS AR LOOD AR SR sea as 428 O Rear Tail Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 429 H License Lamps srs sa RARR BESEER CREE 43 H Center High Mounted Stoplamp 432 W Fluid Capacities 222254 m2 mem De e repa es 433 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 434 EER OE 227425602 IP P m 434 HE EE T pr C T 435 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L uu ee m n ajy Tial e A pad sa e gi ay E 070306968 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Battery Under Cover 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Air Cleaner
132. RI ESPERE 15 Replacement PariS is 02208660004 dob urged 395 Replacement TuS 4455028559544 nt AE DERE 336 Reporting Safety Defects 2 425540634 50 4 ER 460 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 198 Restraint Head eee 139 Restraints Child xao EO AS 74 80 Restraints Infant 155 daran d gom E des 79 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 179 Rotation Tires 0 0 0 0 0 cee ee ee eee 338 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 0 87 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 89 Safety Defects Reporting 0 460 Dalely Exhaust GaS osse nines KS Ko ee moe an 86 Safety Information Tire 221 Dalely 1DE spa doceant bee RACER S hod ER 85 Satellite Radio Antenna 259 269 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 268 Schedule Maintenance leen 438 Seat Belt Maintenance 478 INDEX NEE Id Seat Belt Reminder SS SS 0 0 00 eee 55 eat bel EER seas ese DR OER eee NS 87 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 2 222 SEN RARR x 44 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage it And Pregnant WOMEN sa steed ea EDS vie ines 56 Child Restraint 223x329 a ib 99 809 dees CR 29 9 74 FONT Cai xoc o soe 4208 ES woe too OUD NR 99 INSPCCHON x34 4 05 46552505 644558054 S 87 FIeensiOners ale se see nes 94 4 o9 eie wes 50 K ar Seat RAAI ENS 2a es EE SE HELE 39 Seat Belts Sedan is re DERE PEER dms ds 37 DEAS ase RA oe ears OER SEA RARR EER Ee 132
133. STE EK 361 dii de obsess HOER cae ee DEERE OE 298 Automatic SS SS 12 293 298 416 AWOSE oi kee he dee HER Hie EE ded ox 302 Manual TC 293 296 CDS asa eure cove pe OES be eed 298 Overdrive e xu eR RA SEIS oe es 302 Selection of Lubricant less 416 Transmission Range Indicator Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink Transporting Pets Tread Wear Indicators less 335 Ip Odometer a tins eae C xS 30 9 3 9 RIP S ad 197 Trip Odometer Reset Button sie ect RES 199 TOM Signals os wee SE os eons HR EER as 148 200 429 LEI Connector 2444456 44444645 08 99 308 0908 3 262 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 99 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 189 Uniform Hie Quality Grades e eod ves veu ces 462 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 262 Universal Transmitter SS ss 158 Unleaded Gasoline 0 0 0 000 000 8 348 Vanity MITTOTS 4548 oe oase ME ARE oo eee 98 Vehicle Certification Label 355 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading x 23 2g doe RE RS 327 355 357 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage 482 INDEX NEE Id Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Voice Recognition System VR llis 127 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 192 Warnings and Cautions ve sexes cse RE EP RR E DE 6
134. STRUMENT PANEL 239 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the
135. Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen wher
136. UR m oe 374 Compact AE 2 a5 dede deo ER Cha KA DR 333 HEESE HS uc d9e ve 2x9 52792995 380 General Information 330 Lol eed ssuqGbeee sec EE PA PD DAE p dass 333 Inflation Pressures SE SE SE ee 331 ru A 374 ite Or Wires MORA ER EO EI e con 336 Load apathy saeia ba AR RR iol nes 326 327 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 339 Pressure Warns Licht eaa pe E Ee DERDE 201 OU nb Gd orici mS DER HOE ee YO 462 Radial P 333 REPCE 445405445 oe 5 eo 5 TE CERE P IY 336 KOGON Pr 338 DUIS ston wes dud Pure Ng d eee oss 321 330 nuc 322 xu TMCS PME T LP T 338 Opole TE soeurs qe RA RC Ea dur Parte eod 374 PIE ounetueg ee dnas ages RN ERE TE E SW 334 Tread Wear Indicators 2 4 5 24444 6h et aad eae s 335 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 362 ju PP M OD 24 Hour lowing Assistance v4 uae uem Lis Disabled Venice s 24205 amp Ee bus EER ob BARE 386 cop oi QT 361 ediet oil seer SX ete eee Sq Rd OR Sod 369 Wei scs S ager Roe deg 308 SHEER EORR RETO earns 361 TOWING ASSIStANCe cara dub desired ex URE EE RR 113 icri PC AE OU Be ER ee ee 304 aller TOWO 543545 esta eh eens URS C PES 357 Cooling System IDS sooo ORREL PPP 369 NN INDEX 481 Hitches Minimum Requirements Trailer and Tongue Weight 42433 RR 362 ist LP ESE ONE OER EF 367 Trailer Towne GUIS sgis e ded RE sedans age 361 AE ie di RE EE EE
137. UTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE CAUTION Continued If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the may lead to transmission overheating and failure front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE It can also damage the tires Do not spin the VERSE and 1st gear Using minimal accelerator pedal wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin transmission shifting occurring ning the wheels is most effective NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con WARNING trol or Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle CAUTION Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds contin
138. Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to
139. WD BRAKE mige 2n MEAN WeMDOW ELFZTESCALL PAN LIGTE WEAR FOO LAMP AL DEFWOST AND VENTILATING AS WIP DZRWADICR ROTE FORM WEED a oet HL DEFROST HEATED l OPEN LOWEN AA OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE 7 70 q wv J ho N tow Hee E poU HAUL BATTERY ise ATET dnte ua TE ad tre AAT li Lipi JOM pad Am CONDITA CHALD SEAT ini cecmirio Puch TERN i WAIL CHARGING FE THEN ARTHA e 40 A i OO CA w Low LOWE ANDREAS iW FLUR PORER VESEL KI WEER DOE ABAD SLID DOOD UM LOKTEN ANU TETHER EON UcNMECIT HAZARD EDU WHEEL STEERING FLUO AUD AE CHPLEREN LATCH BITTIDA DTE LA CY e E RIRERG qap d 1i F 2 PUSH OFF MALFUMCTION ENPRE COGLANT Sumi Eiba WEE DODN ALIAM CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE BEE DERE MH CLES Teor INIBCATDHAE Lec oli TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRANMTHYEZTEM A RBAG OFF TOF DOWN TON BF MARA ERI TXONDITIOHER READ ET EONTRERL OFF n10507683 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration and title
140. a Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 H Notes On Playing MP3 Files 254 W Uconnect7M Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ Alba pa Model oe ME hy edet 37 Radios Only sss eel 268 D Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play My ES sien ACH dO acu sd es ea eas ae 1 9 5 os 268 a l TN o eke Multimedia Satellite Radio If D Elesrenie Seral Number Sirius enc SRG GS ae seges SO AIR PR ES Identification Number ESN SID m puc Sn uie ten E OE ri O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite eo iss AREA sauce EE ET d ode ea d OE 202 Mode map O Connecting The iPod ee ee reer O Satellite Antenna 4 lt 4 6 4 mews 69 aw 4 one s 269 O Using This Feattre 2 65950545454 e dos 264 O Reception Quality cece eee ee 269 O Controlling The iPod Using ine I TM Radio Buttons SESSE SS SS SS 264 Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode 270 ARAY Mede m 264 D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone O LitOr Browse Mode sue dese scu et eau es 266 If Equipped 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL O Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES dr EOHIDDEO es dex on oi RARR S ss ll Remote S
141. a aj EN ox NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS on the driver s side B Pillar NEVEREXCEED XXX XNX ies 2 3 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Tire Placard Location A STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupa
142. aler Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN id 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect and replace PCV valve if Inspect the CV joints necessary Inspect exhaust system Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
143. ame having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook i
144. and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion STARTING AND OPERATING 321 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LI Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the 054903773 letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced dards Code TIN n EG BE ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16
145. and Loading Information Placard in Tire Safety Information for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do nottow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to an injury accident e Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can
146. and Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHRat 1 Downward Movement a comfortable position 2 Rearward Movement 022607497 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 1 AA 022607757 ak 022607494 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha AHR In Reset Position Eia EE EE NOTE 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the into the back decorative plastic half Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by you
147. and death will sound as a reminder to remove the key Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 021806187 Driver Power Door Lock Switch 1 Unlock 2 Lock Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 The transmission is in gear 2 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the eng
148. and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as a
149. ants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib od Occupant 3 160 Ibs AER 100 Ibs 3S Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 329 330 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure P
150. are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Manual Front Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the WARNING floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is position Using body pressure move forward and rear dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could ward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be latched properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle i
151. ated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of per
152. be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the Elec tronic Speed Control lever and release Release the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL normal brak ing or pressing the clutch pedal while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a
153. bination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either the front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certi fication Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 359 Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carryi
154. button to the genre listing on your iPod 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REO
155. cants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any
156. cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to the brakes axle engine transmission steer ing suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmis sion shift the transmission into REVERSE AI ways block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 WARNING Continued Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 2 GTW Information in Starting and Operating for the 3 GAWR proper inspection procedure 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized this requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity wil
157. cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EGUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the rear of the center console for added convenience This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter
158. ce the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop NS TA TING AND OPERATING 305 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will reguire extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Thi
159. chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 348 STARTING AND OPERATING 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tellta
160. cle is restarted 031507504 Mist Control 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN Push down on the lever to unlock the column With one This feature allows you to tilt the steering column hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering upward or downward The tilt control lever is located on column up or down as desired Push the lever up to lock the left side of the steering column below the turn signal the column firmly in place UN controls WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death i Tilt Steering Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can
161. cur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the T blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Automatic Temperature Control ATC If 1 Turn the Mode Control
162. d over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri
163. d Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your ve
164. d restraints should always be checked prior to oper ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Continued 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE sus d WARNING Continued Io provide additional storage area each rear seatback can e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head pe folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable seat forward and flat DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Y e j ia d SN KS 030906211 P q i 030907155 Rear Seats Folded Flat Reclining Rear Seat Strap Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped Then push the seatback to a reclined position approxi For additional comfort pull the strap forward just mately 35 degrees maximum and release the strap enough to release th
165. d a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING service During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission overheat in dicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
166. d frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment right rear side and the fluid level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not engine coolant antifreeze WARNINCG Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can in
167. damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Manual Heating and Air Conditioning Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O 045607577 OFF position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off 045607574 position The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2
168. de screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped
169. driving 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of a collision your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associ
170. e limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high guality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id
171. e the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Of Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio
172. e used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation
173. e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc cal roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Older Children and Child Restraints e Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH WARNING child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH e Improper installation can lead to failure of an Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and infant or child restraint It could come loose in a Tether for CHildren collision The child could be badly injured or e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex ing more than 40 Ibs 18 Kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion abu while the child s back is against the seatback
174. e System 212 606 2820 339 Mopar Faris csser eraren ur DER DER eee RS 395 460 Multi Function Control Lever 146 New Vehicle Break In Period 84 Deedat Kestraints avy sa Saw RAD ePX v ye He 64 69 Occupant Restraints Sedan 37 60 61 64 68 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 348 Odometer uus due sos Hy berks a CEE Ode 197 THD EP 197 199 Oil Change diete 22 2 9199 drier Ri Ao 198 dei rr 397 433 S A 433 Change Interval 24465 4345428442 be Te 398 CRECER Eu AS ORDE EER CHEERS RE 397 Disposal nisi EER es DURO dU Hee eed d 399 476 INDEX NEE id j 3246465594 ie ok 5402040 RES SA EDE 400 identification LOBO 23422 2 094294 BEERS d 398 Materials Added tO 3 04 Ao ees e gs 399 Recommendation een 398 433 IE LE Vosa aas a quur Res EER se oes Rubr d 399 VISCOS speram RA RA R PERS EE E 999 Onboard Diagnostic System ss ie N der see 4a 393 394 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 158 Operator Manual Owner s Manual i gui PT 302 Overeating yt EIE eque vase 25 9 nerpa 192 972 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 461 Paid OUE CPC SR RE Ee eas A17 Paro ATE sis bocas ems gom pecie domu tare x 22 Forking DOG vaaccpaares494n45 264 EDE 308 l assmo Die i a us pe 3 a APRECIA ea ben 148 Persona OCOS 42424 RE ER RETRATOS AE ES 211 Pete O 84 Phone Cellular lt 4 uw
175. e aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 As NJ qo Xt De 2 4 e o xz mm si ECYHDHIC BTA SR ITT BATE iH FUEL NEAR WA KA FXTEDICR EAR fiis OE AA TURM inda t LIFE AE HEATED BEAT ADJUSTAES E FLECTRONIC PADICANH MAANI WET FAILUME FPFF CONTRE jer de m TIS iui x 3 z y Q2 ZO oi gas o FEL REAR WIMDCHN WINDSHIELD MASTER LOATH CENE Hen ANG LOWER HEATED I HEAT DEW LET TERE PRESSURE DIE LL DELET wina PARING TSS APEN WEE Fence PEREN OUTLET MDAITIRA a Oe P wn FU T 4 OR OG X Hat Qa g a FUEL FILL SE REAR WAN PRCA A DOMELHGHT FHOHTFOS Lay HBOODRELEAHE LOWER AR amp ECIHCUILATIOR TOHVEITELE TRAAG TIM ALL ent FAILURE OP A4THLOCK MATETE FLA LEVEL Pm eT A WIMDCHN DERI FORT HAA SYEIEM 00 a a m GE v MIT QE CS vd e MI 4
176. e is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407547 Multifunction Lever Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn the multifunction lever to the second detent for headlight operation 031407548 Headlight Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Fog Light Control NOTE The fog lights will only operate when the parking lights or the low beam headlight are on Switch ing from low beam to high beam headlights will cause the fog lights to turn off 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
177. e obstruction and press the switch forward and release to Express Close N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of the sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use o
178. e phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Iowing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Uconnect Phone System t
179. e seatback latch 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 031308845 Hood Release Lever 2 Move the safety catch located under the front edge of the hood near the center and raise the hood TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel 031308846 Safety Catch Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side when standing in front of hood of the engine compart ment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicl
180. e system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings
181. e system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3
182. e unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed To Disarm The System Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter or insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 021410235 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first
183. e ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four pin and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O O QO Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn STARTING AND OPERATING 367 057003766 368 STARTING AND OPERATING rO O YY 057003765 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission
184. ear impact The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 e n the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The hea
185. earward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s sguirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits
186. econds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticed During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wh
187. ed 208 O EVIC Functions sees 14s dG we oe DR 209 CO Compass Temperature Audio 210 D Average Fuel Economy o Distance To Empty DTE HEI eed TING ceed ooo ER Eu rp as 2I D Tire Pressure Monitor IPM 211 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features was uber EE ED IRAK EE Ve GR 211 ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX TACK cc 42 eee uc ido men 217 D Operating Instructions Radio Mode 217 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video O Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files D List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play scarace sse soe RR Ea ride O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped sis 3 44 xia eR ERR eene O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped O Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio 225 O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play iis oes 5 ie n O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Medi
188. ed and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal
189. ee at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer NN ir YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463 in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to t
190. eel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the SOR BEE EL Bon REDI Go GO Wack N Ek the device manufacturer s guidelines mode Placing items on the iPod or connections to the e LIST button The LIST button will display the top iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob device and or to the connectors to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then follow the same steps SESS STER to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving sub menu levels are available on this system Failure to follow this warning could result in an e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is accident another shortcut
191. eep say you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ Dial ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook e Press the button to begin 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each n
192. ehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re moved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
193. el impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner
194. ellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 from your Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Svea button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection b
195. emove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle 035406963 Cargo Cover Guides UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 WARNING e Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers e The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for AN loading your vehicle EE Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as Rear Cargo Area possible Cargo Tie Down Loops There are two D rings installed in the cargo area for securing cargo Removable Load Floor The cargo area contains a removable load floor Continued 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Fold Dow pedir T Egdippad When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and axle Too much weight or improperly placed other activities weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback
196. en pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued CAUTION Continued e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and result in a complete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked only by a trained technician Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes to Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Fluid N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 CVTF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
197. ency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 CAUTION WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will soun
198. ensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System V This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressu
199. enu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook
200. eparator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 MPEG Sampling Be as Pit Rate pe 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 MPEG 2 Audi
201. er Inverter If Equipped 170 W Cupholders ee a ee ere eee 172 dco AP EET 173 XO Glove Compartment And Storage Bin 179 O Upper Instrument Panel Storage 173 o Door Storage If Equipped 174 ll Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment If Equipped 175 167 W Console Features 176 W Cargo Area Features 0 178 D Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging EF ei E uus cose OR EE ETE 178 EL Carbo COVER 454 ped dodo SE Bue dete Rodi N HR as 179 o Removable Load Floor 181 o Cargo Ti Down Loops 252 2x aeos 181 3 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped 182 W Rear Window Features 183 o Rear Window Wiper Washer 183 H Rear Window Defroster 184 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature
202. er s door trim panel 030410215 030408829 Mirror Directions Power Mirror Control To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear Vanity Mirror window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Sun Visor Sliding Feature Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further The sun visors may be extended out to provide more information coverage of the side glass 030408830 Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the vanity mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g
203. ertock SEN 224 edecpcetcbee fpes ev eres 300 N INDEX 467 OUVEIDO UIS cong cee GR esse PES tena tee es 373 Selection OF Lubricant 222 2489 408 879 HERE d 416 ELS sies kake Men ae DE 300 Special Additives 4 3n orb i EE orci di 416 PUO E esse an 2 os Cot ie nl eee Ve 302 Dale este due 505 RAM Va ee as 2 ea 401 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 DENG eal sooo dee EE Se Wege ex RE 87 Deverdbe COOR aa Hie sor MED Ein d gods 175 Body Mechanism Lubrication 403 BE ill LOCANON iu race sd BRAAK dud 326 Brake Assist DV SIOD sieas samena de ERROR 314 Drake PEDIR s 2 9 ecd votos R1 8 9 83 395 or ey eee sas 435 Drakes FOURIE PC 308 Brake gt Steal oa ER DER e RED ME HER HOS 310 413 Ant Lock ADS 243 pe de RE e esas 311 314 Master CYIWdEr s cse doter IERE EES ED 413 POKING AR EE EO EET FEE EE 308 Ware LIONE vissie E ou PPP RS RES kini 195 BEKER TEENS T ETT TET TET 310 413 Brake Transmission Interlock 299 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 84 Bulb Replacement sers 45 6560 AARDE eae 427 bulbs EIS 5 x3 d sca ocio Sed ee RARR ROER e d 89 427 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 433 Capacities TNI na edd vuv sug dees eee EAE 433 Caps Filler lo M TTC 353 CULTEDSIBE 4x5 yeas HEER PORRO A NO 392 399 Power OCENE P oe 307 Car Washes ob RR RS yat OE debug SES 418 Carbon Monoxide Warning 86 352 Cargo Area COVE 454444574 nau Genes PT Sd 179
204. erve the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat
205. ese systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key
206. essage will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you tum the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 15 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE IUS indicator shows that the Speed Control system is ON 16 TriplOdometer Di
207. et blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knohs for comfort Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden Auiomatic Blower Preterred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to anv desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comtort Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Aulo Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point User selectable lo any air delivery point Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable oulside or recirculated Automatic User setectable A C on or otf User selectable AIC on or off 045609172 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to di
208. et prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To ass
209. etween a Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the vr button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the button to begin e After the Ready promp
210. ewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll equipped up and down the menu if equipped NOTE e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between e The available selections for each of the above entries P playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by varies depending upon the disc EE Pano e These selections can only be made while playing a e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options nini will display the following e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch OFF if equipped subtitles to different subtitle languages that are e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if available on the disc if equipped equipped N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startu
211. fer when properly restrained in size the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Infants and Child Restraints younger than one year old Both types of child re straints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System PE Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section WARNING e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either r
212. function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I v an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 26 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light a This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause ies ABS The light wil
213. ge of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or STARI position Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in Starting and Operating for further information Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmission Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language W
214. grammable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the v
215. guired HOTOLL iude pip e oe wed Engine Oil Temp Too Hot NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the in strument cluster all warnings including door and 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed gATE and Oil Change Required will only be dis played in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LoW TirE When tire pressure is low the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles HOTOIL When this message is displayed there is a engine over temperature condition When this condition occurs the HOTOIL message will be displayed in the odometer along with a chime Refer to Engine Oil Overheating under in What To Do In Emergencies noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE m
216. h as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a
217. h the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to
218. he Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time turn it to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder NOTE The key that is used to start your vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate 2 021906197 Window Lockout Switch 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed NOTE without using the key To open the liftgate sgueeze the e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the motio
219. he SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR IN
220. help protect the knees of the passenger side front passenger by positioning the pas senger for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the driver side knee airbag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protec tion for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child P seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the pro
221. hen in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol or Francais depending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE Uconnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Uconnect Phone If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmission or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL position auto matic transmission Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When Driver s Door 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When Re mote Unlock All Doors is selected
222. her than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle gency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Continued 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile F
223. her the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of th
224. hicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Com
225. his tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The 464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNINCG The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 466 INDEX NEE Id ABS Anti Lock Brake System 311 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 409 demo oo ME EER ET EE EE 303 Adding Washer Fluid ua oe ede eed een tee eo 404 Addi ves Tuel sae Ad Sot dant ard iota HA 351 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter
226. hone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a e The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven with one being want to call the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number connected to your Uconnect Phone The priority and then dial The number will appear in the display allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular of certain radios phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the e Press the amp button to begin Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You ek to usea i E een EEORIDEOROUAe COLONIS bespre lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Call P y P n Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e For example you can say 234 567 8901 Call by Saying a Name Dial by Saying a Number e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example e After the Ready prompt and the following b
227. hone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt
228. hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze ot
229. if you ask for help 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your celluar phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular p
230. ight If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5 trol system ESC has been turned off by the OFF driver 20 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 21 Vehicle Security Light If Eguipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 22 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activationl Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator funi Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRU
231. ights and other electrical items for correct Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following operation pages for the required maintenance intervals At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C
232. ime of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals The horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the parking lights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To Set The Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks ar
233. in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 022607508 Be Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607492 H
234. ine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do n
235. ing it indicates that the anti lock portion of the those resulting from excessive speed in turns brake system is not functioning and that service is following another vehicle too closely or hydro required However the conventional brake system will planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning can prevent accidents Light is not on Continued The ABS Warning Light monitors the ABS System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds NS TA TING AND OPERATING 313 If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during b
236. ing Water 305 W Power Steering 00000 307 O Power Steering Fluid Check 307 W arking EA ES AA EE FEES 308 W Brake rr 310 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 311 W Electronic Brake Control System 314 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 314 O Brake Assist System BAS 314 B Traction Control System TCS 515 o Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transmission Only i29 KORO Ray RAS 316 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 318 W Tire Safety Information 321 O Tire Markings srep si doge iiaii ef O Tire Identification Number TIN 324 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 925 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 326 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 W Tires General Information 330 W Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 209 FUG Eu qq 330 Hie lei 3 scs EI GR ponat DE eo E 342 O Tire Inflation Pressures 331 O Premium System If Equipped 344 H Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 333 O General Information 348 E Radial Ply Tires uus e suerte cease ada a 333 W Fuel Requirements 348 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 999 B Reformulated Gasoline ide PRINS 5 4 ga o d cur der dd qood d RAAR 334 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends O Tread Wear Indicators sis gehe new ee 335 O E85 Usage In Non
237. ink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the handheld transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code oystem 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and obs
238. into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the t
239. ions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option suc
240. ions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the OFF position 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction
241. ir conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Commands In this mode you can say the following commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported e Disc to switch to the disc mode radio mode is active e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder Changing the Volume 3 e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped 2 Say a command e g Help To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Ge AE OE E volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command e Frequency to change the frequency system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station Main Menu P Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vR e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu button You may say Main Menu
242. is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Differ ent airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then guickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle
243. is should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them In addition never leave unattended children in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CR5 These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts in Passenger Seating Positions section The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Left Center Right EE FirstRow AR Third Row o Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To
244. is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a crosshatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil 7 level at the full end of the indicator range 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For be
245. ist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you
246. iver side knee airbag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision
247. jure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continued 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con verter will not require maintenance However it is im trol device and may seriously reduce engine per portant to keep the engine properly tuned to ass
248. k Turn Signal Side Marker Lamp 3157AK LEONE POS DD bacs TOE EE rU S S PSX24W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHI LL spero oru Gh RR ee oe LED Assembly Rear Tail Stop Lamp a ie AD tardi eee es 9157 Rear Turn Signal Lamp e lt 4 20 ki wx 3757AK Dackup Lampe eass rus ere eos eee ae eee 921 W16W bres OE di P m WOW BULB REPLACEMENT Front Headlamps Parking and Turn Signal Lamps NOTE The headlamp bulb can be accessed from under the hood without the removal of the inner fender well It will be necessary to remove the inner fender well to service the park turn signal bulb that is located toward the outboard side of the head lamp unit 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 2 Working in the appropriate wheel well loosen the front of the splash shield but do not fully remove it 3 Looking up through the front wheel well locate the bulb which needs replacing The headlamp bulb is the inboard bulb and the park turn signal bulb is the out board bulb 4 Disconnect the bulb electrical connector 5 Grasp the bulb twist 1 4 turn counterclockwise and pull straight out of front lamp unit Fog Lamps CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 1 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 2 Remove the front wheel and tire on the same
249. ke fluid in the master cylinder drops the Brake Warning Light will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking per formance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immedi ately ram Anti Lock Brake System ABS The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up 312 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase ies braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on The ABS cannot prevent accidents including while driv
250. knob on the right and the Equipped Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dialin the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati 045607537 cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 0458075313 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation Operation of the system is quite simple EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72 F 22 C however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting
251. ks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order De
252. l System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 470 INDEX NEE Id Electronic Stability Program ESP 318 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 206 Emergency In Case of JACKING cet eh ER EE OT ee od E 374 Jump SIDE sus ARE 2 med EDE EDE ue 4 vis 380 Jc EE EE SEER ET OE TE nm 386 Emission Control System Maintenance 394 438 EHOHI 24 cuagdsstd4s41 434e DAE Cu Rd AKA 392 Eed del ii AR OER OE OE EE ET DT 295 Break In Recommendations 84 Checking Od Level y erea Ge DER KARRE DE ae 997 COOUMG AMD 407 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 86 352 Fil Segue Ies vos se 3 395 9 2 de e dog 348 PUMPS at nto eae Bac ea ne ge cada aa 380 ON ee 397 433 434 Oil Change Interval ossi ur eb PES PES 398 Od Eille Cap sacs E52 EAE Ier d oe RS 392 399 qug arrere e en pense eee NES EED aes 434 Oil Selection 4 4544 46 8 6 oe oto BERAAM ARE 398 OILS kielie as PAP EER PIOS HARARE sa 399 verlies yaaa ad rare a RE PAL a 372 Temperature Gauge os es erare he toa 192 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 68 Exhaust Gas Caution 36 86 352 EXIdHS OVON sus oos RAD eae en coe od 86 405 EXIGHOF LISBIS 22224543454 FARE Ke RO EAE SE 89 Filler Location Fuel een 193 Filters D WPSICUCERMERERTSRUSQTUQURSTRITEIRTT 400 Soete soete AE AE nian ARE 3
253. l change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals CAUTION as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake onde peroni rie ned ote maintenance ems l mE may result in damage to the vehicle master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed Required Maintenance Intervals e Check all l
254. l not increase the vehicle s Towing Requirements Tires GVWR and GAWR limits ra Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres required when towing a trailer with electronically sures before trailer usage 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id actuated brakes When towing a trailer eguipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not reguired e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg CAUTION Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and th
255. l turn on when the ignition damage to the engine control system It also could switch is turned to the ON position and may affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is stay on for as long as four seconds flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate WARNING normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock operating conditions This can cause a fire if you brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the drive slowly or park over flammable substances such Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could light inspected by an authorized dealer result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Eguipped During sustained high speed driving on hot days the automatic transmission oil may be come too hot If this happens the Transmission Temperature Warning Light will come on and the vehicle will s
256. lack button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 When To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12
257. lding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made yo
258. le within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and ho
259. le Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses TEE ET KERE ee KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 Poor guality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the a
260. le that it has an airbag system Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Continued Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal 2 accidentally or may not function properly if modi MEN circuits and interconnecting wiring associated fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho with airbag system electrical components While the rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser i airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any vice If your seat including your trim cover and of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is ries may be used If it is necessary to modify the first turned to the ON position airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while
261. ll for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE The light may flash momentarily
262. llular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the So button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indica
263. lly upward past the second detent 031409884 Map Reading Lights NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle The lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF if the door is left open or light is switched on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The windshield wiper washer control lever is K located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Fea tures in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle 036407502 Wiper Washer Control Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Wiper Control 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the end of the lever upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated
264. low faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly
265. low slightly until the automatic trans mission cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 WARNING Continued operation with the Transmission Tem perature Warning Light illuminated could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components causing a fire that may result in personal injury 28 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the EVIC messages 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information 30 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Button If Equipped Press the left EVIC button to scroll through sub menus Press and hold the reset button for approximately two seconds to reset the display shown Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
266. lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area an
267. m at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNINCG Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either the amp radio or the mirror will contain the two control buttons amp Uconnect Phone button and vr Voice Command button that will en able you to access the system Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect P
268. mation section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla Hon pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be inc
269. n or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or un defined None NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 16 Digit Character Program Type Dar _ 16 Digit Character Display News News Program Type Top 40 Top40 40 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to switch to different audio languages if supported on select an entry and make changes the disc if equipped e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current the vi
270. n e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Off Indicator Light The ESC Off Indicator Light located in the d instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the ee tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Off Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Off Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING Continued e ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light in the md instrument cluster will come on when the ee ignition s
271. n liftgate lock cylinder and turn it to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion e Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your 022210243 passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep Liftgate Handle the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental dr
272. n invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files a
273. n when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery Positive Battery Post 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative e
274. n you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 335 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 5 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 Worn Tire to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 New le replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 336 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little
275. nd of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CA
276. nd System SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode If Equipped No function For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ru EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode ing The Features Of Your Vehicle No function For Uconnect Voice Command refer to Uconnect a Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering o
277. nd folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate TUNE SCROLL O 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Pus
278. ng Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control and thereby en hancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds contributing positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recom mended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Installing A Trailer Hitch NOTE If you install a trailer hitch after you purchase the vehicle you must install a MOPAR or equivalent spare tire hold down kit The kit will allow you to properly secure the spare tire and jack assembly WARNINCG Do not operate the vehicle without a p
279. ng the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display 16 Digit Character rogram Type Displ spay No program type None or undefined NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station tha
280. nly a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned OFF The sunroof operation will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the instrument panel for added convenience This power outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices 034608842 12 Volt Power Outlet Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 DE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and CAUTION element must be used e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may
281. nough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a driver side knee airbag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022609125 Airbag and Knee Bolster Location 3 Knee Bolster Driver
282. nsors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted elec
283. nspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 5046 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer 150 Months Maintenance to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Service Schedule warranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter WARNING _I Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter _J Replace the spark plugs L1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic
284. ntained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the RW FF Auxiliary Mode AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume No function on SET Button Auxiliary Mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function f ion No function Operating Instructions Voice Comma
285. ntervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and 1 oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remo
286. nts cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 4 The resulting figure eguals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occup
287. ny emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap I the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal reguirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration KO nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced
288. o Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second Se E Ee o a ot the radio om OT Electronic Volume Control da The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 042005200 Media Center 230 REO 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect mes
289. o 24 22 05 16 Layer 3 Sampling Bit Rate kbps esteties Freguency kHz P 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files co
290. o allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone System Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VR butt
291. o provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat routing it over the head restraint 2 e f necessary move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchor 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within th
292. off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the Uconnect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the EVIC button until On or Off appears 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Display
293. ohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu mance and damage the emission control system lated gasoline An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition Materials Added To Fuel malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to All gasoline sold in the United States is required to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or contain effective detergent additives Use of additional some light smoke your engine may be out of tune detergents or other additives is not needed under normal or malfunctioning and may require immediate conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore service Contact your authorized dealer for service you should not have to add anything to the fuel assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of Methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance Continued 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control WARNING Continued systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colo
294. ollision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Continued 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air WARNING Continued bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out e Do not put anything on or around the airbag board side of the front seats covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc j A 022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label If Equipped When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags provide en front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
295. on CAUTION e Do not flat tow any vehicle equipped with a automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flasher 372 W Jump Starting Procedures 380 H If Your Engine Overheats 972 O Preparations For Jump Start 381 W Automatic Transaxle Overheating 373 O Jump Starting Procedure W Jacking And Tire Changing 374 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle AJack Gede PPP 374 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle appare Tre DIONdPE 2 eee oe oe HEURE A 374 E Mtl IP HO ROV oss dr ERRORES 386 O Preparations For Jacking 375 O Without The Ignition Key 387 O Jacking Instructions 376 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher Do not use this emerg
296. on and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the vm button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the EVR button and say Pair a Phone to select that op
297. onth When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freez ing e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not
298. ontrol and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 338 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles opera
299. ook Francais See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Setup Uconnect Tutorial Read Send Messages Messages 030607515 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Voice Tree Phonebook Phensbosik Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed SHE Enter Name 1st Confirmation EN at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added Nurber Entry is modified Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Announcement Contirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming va ra Device towing Message Eum Assistance _ Language Toggle Confirmation New phone Select a language well English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais amol override phone priorities Select phone to be deleted List Phones System Lists Phones Mote Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 oice Commands Primar Alternate s X three O tw fj eight nine
300. ormula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pre
301. ot start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors f Equipped To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To engage or disengage the Child Protection Door Lock system 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door Ww Child Protection Door Lock Location 021806189 Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with
302. ound System Controls I BOIDDEd vs cu dessen e P V ERES EMR Adio person uas a debes qe ESTEE at EED Pl 66430855 EERW AA UR PR HS B CD DVD Disc Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 275 om WM Climate Controls ugue DEE DRIE 28 275 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 276 ree D D Automatic Temperature Control ATC 974 If BQUIDDOG serpa uis near ae UR de pct a 280 0 274 EVO peratine TIDS au sb RABE dom d HARE 285 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES YONG 3 4 my SM h Y Vi f ES GE ye EN A A hy A A BS AA T ZFA LL i DI OOIE 5 040108831 1 Air Outlet 5 Lower Glove Compartment Beverage 9 ESC OFF Switch If Equipped Cooler If Equipped 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Climate Controls 10 Storage Bins 3 Radio 7 Heated Seat Switches If Equipped 11 Power Outlet 4 Passenger Airbag 8 Hazard Warning Flasher 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE CRUISE 040307600 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM mmm uou 4 x1000 m CRUISE E 14 040307601 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS CAUTION 1 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal
303. our head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Positioning Lap B Belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
304. out speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery
305. ow Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag SABIC airbags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags and knee airbag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the sever ity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side collisions The Advanced Front Airbags and knee airbag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collis
306. p propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country reguire the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air guality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol 350 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s
307. p Package AHC Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information 362 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of con trol of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire
308. p DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Subtitles If Eguipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wi
309. ped 25 EL How do Use Remote Stari uus zar ent ea x 25 Mi look REP 27 E Manual Door Locks 2 10 mh vate ears 27 O Power Door Locks 425454845454 AE VO EE 28 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped ii 64 54 Gach bam e s 31 Mi Power Windows If Equipped 33 OD Power Window Switches is cese mc mes 39 OAWODOWN 2464044660 EE BE a S kepa kepa 34 O Window Lockout Switch iese EE 35 Mi ii Dr 35 W Occupant Restraints x25 exascem x e eh tes 37 O Lap Sh ulder Belts ssa scies sie ASE AES iis 39 O Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 44 O Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions With A Mini Latch And Buckle 45 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 48 o Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode EJU ppd 6 44454 ene ee OER OR EERS 48 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 49 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 50 D Event Data Recorder EDR 72 E Energy Management Feature 2 6 ives 209 50 LK ld Estie oe aeg bay pot AE RA eon d O Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 51 MH Engine Break In Recommendations H Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Mi oately Tips iuo mae HE Ee dk ye REG EAS PRSE BR RY a a 22 O Iransporting Passengers a d uas SKREE ES 85 El Seat belt Extender 4 4 4 0 400 4405 24604 es 56 ET oo oe ce kk ee N 86 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
310. pending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag infla
311. pener HomeLink 158 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap vex mm m 959 055 393 Gasoline Clean Air eee 349 Gasoline Fuel Lu ia bass 4440 8 RO Ek Red 348 433 Gasoline Reformulated 349 Gauges Coolant Temperate 23229529999 iiai 192 l2id AE 193 472 INDEX NEE Id Odometer setels sk ER AIR RUE R ER DE 197 Tachometer ug 9930 393 478909 RE BE Ed ge 196 Gear DIL siese ade bad Boe HE we ee AO are 300 General Information 17 127 348 General Maintenance less 396 Glass C IGI E sies se eves MORA CR Roe ego ane ve 421 Glove Compartment s 5 04 di PERRA atta 175 Gross Axle Weight Ratl g a aae ie rm a AK 358 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 356 357 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 99 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water i29 EER ra 305 Hazard Warning Flasher 5 52 Rn 372 Head Restraints 44cm aee ded edo 4 ROEGOR bee od 159 Lied lis PPP 427 SA PC 421 Hida Bedii P r r 148 High Beam Low Beam Select 5witch 148 POSE uci donde ges Fe Edo Eod deber IK 148 olie ox iuuat ue d Wachs Gace ee ed 427 SWIECI o 42 SA RA PA Bei 146 Heated Mirrors 22 23 wwe drama Ee H 98 Heated Seals s aec od gu ace dece Ro 137 eater ose ent ae ee eee koe S EOS RUE ea ed 276 Heater Engine Block aas 46 544 4244020 65 295 Hill Start Assist sies raecmerieesi ceeemex 316 Hitches dader TOE
312. per child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 AM occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Continued WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or wind
313. piratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When in
314. played on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 e Distance To Empty DTE e Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM e Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function reset ALL will be displayed during this three second window 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted avera
315. point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes of corrosion are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and grav
316. ported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness Bluetooth Communication Link to a large degree rely on the phone and network and Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to not the Uconnect Phone the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connec e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced x pu pbi PISCINE Mo by lowering the in vehicle audio volume pue EO OE OON Tu remain in Bluetooth ON mode 3 e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Recent Galls Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Main Menu d ce Emergency eem em Phoneb
317. pped with four cupholders There are rear passengers two cupholders located in the front m N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 STORAGE Upper Instrument Panel Storage A storage compartment is located in the center of the instrument panel Glove Compartment And Storage Bin The glove compartment storage bin is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Upper Storage Compartment Glove Compartment Storage Bin 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed To open the storage compartment push down on the Door Storage If Equipped button The lid will open automatically Push down on The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage the lid to close it areas 035209049 Front Door Storage NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 CHILL ZONE BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE COMPARTMENT IF EQUIPPED The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the vehicle The large glove compartment door swings downward and features two levels of storage The upper bin functions as the Chill Zone cooled beverage storage compartment for vehicles equipped with air condition ing for storing up to four 20 oz 1 L bottles or cans When desired cool air enters the Chill Zone to keep the contents cool depending on ambient temperature and A C settings Glove Compartment and Chill Zone NOTE The use of the Chill Zone is for nonperishable beverages
318. previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases Manual Transaxle Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed con trol A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills with
319. provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side O EN WEG Cf AJ M 022608532 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Label Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNINCG e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag The supplemental driver side knee airbag provides en hanced protection and works together with the advanced driver side frontal airbag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters
320. r the CVT will stay in the manually selected ratio e f the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e f the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Repla
321. r authorized dealer or by performing the following procedure NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long e
322. r change the Sirius subscription 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI 0 5 IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN RED REW RB2 or REZ
323. r disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arro
324. r the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE butto
325. raking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 314 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All sys tems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are
326. rder for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to
327. re Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 343 fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM se
328. reased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 333 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi Hons are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be reguired for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original eguipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in B WARNING the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial
329. rect airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with 04560755 the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in
330. rless and odorless gas which can Carbon Monoxide Warnings kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period of time If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh out Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning side air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface Fuel Filler Door 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is
331. roper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Infor
332. roperly se cured tire and jack assembly Any loose items may be thrown forward in a collision or hard stop and strike occupants causing serious or fatal injury Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Industry Standards Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 2 0L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man with 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Trailer Tow Pre
333. running This is in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the click This is an indication that cap is properly tight tank filled ened Continued If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NS TA TING AND OPERATING 355 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Understanding Your
334. s 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary I Replace the air conditioning filter L1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary L Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter _I If using your vehicle for any of the Inspect the CV joints following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect exhaust system Inspect the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for replace if necessary damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert
335. s chest N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy
336. s downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the eo button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e f
337. s parked 030907665 Front Seat Adjustment 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Manual Lumbar If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the side of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support driving position rotate the handle up or down 030907661 030907660 Seat Height Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Driver s Seatback Recline WARNING To recline Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner position only when the vehicle is parked 030907662 Reclining Seat 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Six Way Power Seats If Equipped WARNING The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the switch to move theseat up Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is down forward rearward or to tilt the seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose
338. s will minimize wave effects Continued 306 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you eee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 POWER
339. sa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll fr
340. sage will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search fo
341. se tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 Ge m id Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the Jacking Locations ground CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 378 WHAT TO DO IN
342. se up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 13 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 14 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display snp hoe on DE RR E SS ERA HE DES Door Ajar RE AE EET ERTS HE TER Gate Ajar PASGAP guess ee een eaes deaceacs Fuel Cap Fault LOW Titl 4 ea Comes Low Tire Pressure MOPUSE ss oes rri me dere eis oe es Fuse Fault CHANGE OM ses 454 ERR Oil Change Re
343. seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions are capable of accommo dating LATCH compatible child seats NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be in stalled in the outboard positions only If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seat ing positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child A N 022610237 seats so that two seats share a common anchorage If E J mum installing seats in adjacent seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing the LAT
344. senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If its cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and sd then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near sd If it is sunny you may want
345. session compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejec
346. side of the vehicle as the fog lamp being serviced Refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in What To Do In Emer gencies for further information 3 Remove the three screws that secure the outboard side of the front wheel house splash shield to the front fascia 4 Remove the push pin fastener that secures the inboard side of the splash shield to the front end sheet metal 5 Remove the two push pin fasteners that secure the forward edge of the splash shield to the front fascia closure panel 6 Fold the front of the splash shield rearward far enough to access the back of the front fascia N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 7 From behind the front fascia disconnect the engine compartment wire harness connector from the front fog lamp bulb connector receptacle 8 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and sgueeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing 9 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing Rear Tail Turn Signal and Backup Lamps 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the 3 Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb zo p uon EE Re cubre 4 Twist and remove socket from the lamp NOTE It is not necessary to completely remove the tail lamp unit Once loosened from the quarter panel there should be enough room to service any of
347. sonal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Pedal position seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat e And other parameters depending on vehicle n child Use the restraint that is correct for your configuration Child Restraints WARNING Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others Children 12 years and younger should ride properly could be badly injured Any child riding in your buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s statistics children are sa
348. speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire ge associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safet standards and i is approved tor hi hwa use igits ABCD Code used by the tire ee one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01
349. splay Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles 0 km The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the al Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 18 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQ lights or headlights are turned on 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator L
350. ssure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a m
351. st performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance i
352. stalling hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft cloth FUSES Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in i Pi Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa
353. t Automatic Transmission CVT If MOPAR CVTF 49 Equipped Manual Transmission If ME Ed Pd MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed MICE TRA E product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power pecu Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans pec ES Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Information Provided by DEENLER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS N Emissions Control System Maintenance 438 O Required Maintenance Intervals Mi Maintenance Schedule 438 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is s
354. t Your Uconnec A PRODE s si ecd Eoo meh SR E Pere d 118 O General Information 127 ll Voice Command If Equipped 127 O Voice Command System Operation 127 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E aleei n 55n54 45540 45266 teeess 129 M To Open And Close The Hood 144 O Voice Training see eee eee eee 192 WEIGHS ke eS RE OE EER Y DESERT EE 146 W Seats aie SERE OR KORE RR ne wes 192 O Multifunction Lever ss ss ee 146 O Manual Front Seat Adjustment 133 o Headlights And Parking Lights 146 o Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Q Lights On Kemind r o4 4 ee 44 RES EE 95 147 Eouip Ed S vus wed 053 RES Fenn VR SA Xt 134 D Fog Lights If Equipped u 147 O Manual Lumbar If Equipped 134 EVI CMAs wae ea po SEERDE ba BP DAE 148 O Driver s Seatback Recline 135 5 High Low Beam Switch 148 O Six Way Power Seats If Equipped 156 OFlash To Pass SS cece ee 148 D Heated Seats If Equipped ne a Instrument Panel Dimmer 149 o Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 138 D Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 149 O Adjusting Active Head Restraints 139 5 Map Reading Lights 0 00 150 Ee DE debetis dept in M Windshield Wipers And Washers 151 CO Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 143 O Windshield Wiper Operation
355. t and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the EVR button and say the Setup Voice Training command N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command e
356. t pi sorde dose qoidem pores 204 Manual Transmission 2 226 DEE END 2g DU eee 293 KOWO crm 29 Ore Procedures Gases ce aoa Pet X ERREUR Go 293 Steering Ro A 307 TUE OGE 1s ic Ge eee BARE HOE eee eat 154 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 273 Jv 5 m ee ee oe 427 Irene eDIK spes SR DEE 179 DIDIABS VONG 44544 5444 ou oe SKARREL HE 285 viue Psi ia bee BED 045 Hee Re es 385 DUM Kool seere iarr tages RR RP POE tee ae 165 S t Visor Extensi n sss s seed de n on ees enus 98 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 07 OVOMICG Eum OW 134 vende SEED BROERS 999 Systemi Remote Starting ios esso coe Es DRR Rx 25 TONOM ies devi med ER EE HR 196 Talis DS os sees OR KAR RR NE HA d ei 429 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 280 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 192 373 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 78 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System Security Alarm 17 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 3 car d ordo 2 ud BEER 181 Tilt Steetins COMMN ios PER DRR 584 154 Tire and Loading Information Placard 326 Tire Identification Number TIN 480 INDEX NEE Id Tuc Marines oek edue tub RS HARD RE AAS E E RS 321 Tine Safety InformauOn 5 4 5245444 IRE ti 321 iii oeeuese ws EE ER AE EE TE 89 330 462 Aging Lite of DES 2422 s 336 AM POSU KP Lr 330 Stu EMT 440 ER ease enh HD DE HE AE 338 CHaneme iis aas RAK ARE EUER E
357. t you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multi
358. tains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or a high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARS Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause res
359. te at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More freguent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is shown in the following diagram ED C 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not
360. ter A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve so please follow the procedures in this section carefully hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the precautions tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible CAUTION WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the alternator or electrical system may occur deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381 WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment below the air intake duct To access the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two finger screws located on the radiator support Air Intake Finger Screws 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fa
361. the air conditioning is not necessary e f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control The system will Air Temperature Control Air Recirculation Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation S
362. the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recircu lation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put th
363. the heater and the indicator light off after 30 min utes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE A Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat To fold the front passenger seat lift the recliner handle to e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates the full upward position and push the seatback forward against heat such as a blanket or cushion This until it rests on the seat cushion may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 030907664 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 030910214 Zi on i E 030907652 Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat Adjusted Head Restraint Adjusting Active Head Restraints Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a r
364. the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended 021906196 Power Window Switch Location Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel t
365. the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete m
366. the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list pressing this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 e While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five s
367. the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
368. ting that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Svea button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the So button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the
369. ting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric t
370. tion Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse mad Empt ss Empty E 15 Amp AWD 4WD ECU Lt Blue Feed 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow Cavity Cartridge Fuse 3 7 30 Amp Green 30 Amp Green 10 Amp Red 40 Amp Green CHMSL Brake Switch Feed Ignition Switch Feed OCM Trailer Tow If Equipped IOD Sw Pwr Mir Steering Cntrl Sdar Hands Free Phone If Equipp ed IOD Sensel IOD Sense2 Power Seats If Equipped Cavity Cartridge Fuse M EN ni FI Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Description CCN Power Locks Interior Lighting 15 Amp Power Outlet Lt Blue 20 Amp Ign Run Acc Inverter Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp IOD CCN Red Pwr Run Acc Outlet RR Dome Lamp Cigar Lighter 15 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat Green tery Feed 16 15 Amp Lt Blue IGN Run Acc Dome Lamp Sunroof Rear Wiper Motor ACC Inverter MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse N WE ial Red Red Eguipped EE PWR Feed Lt Blue 2 Yellow 2 Feed Red Feed Lt Blue Red Feed 10 Amp IOD Feed Intrus Hot Car No Fuse Re Red Mod Siren If quired Equipped 20 Amp Heated Seat If Yellow Equipped 10 Amp Headlamp Washer Red Relay Control If Equipped ENG ASD Control Feed 1 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION Fuse Fuse Jes ABS MOD
371. tion These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de Maintaining Your Airbag System ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you in another collision Have the airbags protect you Do not modify the components or seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat wiring including adding any kind of badges or belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the dealer immediately Also have the Occupant Re upper right side of the instrument panel Do not straint Controller System serviced as well modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehic
372. tion without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of c
373. tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 334 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping whe
374. tires only The jack should not be used to lift the Spare Tire and Jack Stowage vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the cargo area Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down in the cargo area Eed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 Preparations For Jacking 4 Turn OFF the ignition 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or 5 Tum on the Hazard Warning flasher slippery areas WARNINCG Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel il geret ati EEEH f 1 om N qn L i ALT TIERE i i l l ii vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when GEBEBE SE operating the jack or changing the wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle 2 Set the parking brake while the vehicle is being jacked 3 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow the
375. ton CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a s
376. touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 This feature allows an iPod to be plugged into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e It may be necessary to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connecting the cable e If the iPod battery is completely
377. tronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various lire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id
378. ts are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Daytime Running Lights If Equipped This feature may be performed by either low beam headlights or by high beam headlights depending on the specific regulations of your geographical area Daytime Running Lights DRL may operate at a lower intensity 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE than the normal lamp operation The high beam head lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights DRL which is at a lower intensity than the normal high beams The DRL s will come on whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except for PARK NOTE The DRLs will automatically turn off when the turn signals or Hazard Warning flashers are in operation and automatically turn back on when the turn signals and Hazard Warning flashers are not operating Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light off The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fu
379. u can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows You to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Ever
380. ular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel Mini Latch Stowage 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the 5 Sit back in seat Slide the regular latch plate up the seat webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Routing the Rear Center Shoulder Belt 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight will withdraw any slack in the belt pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle P 022610239 Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the b
381. under Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and normal conditions However in a collision the belt will using a seat belt properly lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the i Wearing your belt Ln the wrong place could make belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as your injuries in a collision much worse You might necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out n ay of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Y 022608928 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat Pulling Out the Latch Plate THINGS TO KN
382. uously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Continued 386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Automatic Transaxle e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground e All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles must be towed on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Manual Transaxle e Front Wheel Drive FWD or All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated e FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground All Transaxles If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387 CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position
383. ure formance and cause serious damage to the engine proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst Continued damage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the
384. uspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oi
385. ve the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is eguipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep tenance reguired flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with WARNING an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can clamps to touch each other burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vente
386. vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage it until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase the engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily STARTING AND OPERATING 369 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational Towing Condi tion Four Wheel Flat Tow All Wheels on Ground Manual Trans Automatic mission Ve Transmission hicles Vehicles N Flat Bed Tow All Wheels on Bed of Truck Two Wheel Never Never Dolly Tow Front or Rear Wheels on Ground 370 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE Vehicles eguipped with manual transmissions may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transmis sion is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC positi
387. veral times until the EVIC displays the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed 4 Using a long button press more than one second press the EVIC button this will place the Compass in calibration mode The CAL indicator will come on con tinuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the com pass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate 5 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A short EVIC button press from the Calibrate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable Features and return it to its normal operating mode UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO Operating Instructions Radio Mode RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER l MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right E tetadio E Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radi
388. w pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1
389. warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT have been shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends using gasoline without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not their gasoline contains MMT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels CAUTION Continued higher than those allowed in the United States e The use of leaded gas is pr
390. witch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Malfunc tion Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions
391. y Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks G a Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from Manual Door Lock Plunger inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021808824 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING CAUTION e Do not leave children or animals inside parked An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as Power Door Locks well as when you park and leave the vehicle A power door lock switch is on each front door trim When leaving the vehicle always remove the key Panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do liftgate not leave unattended children in the vehicle or NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised the power door lock switch will not operate when the key use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime sonal injuries
392. y time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect M Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station

2010 Dodge Caliber Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents